JP7168986B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can generate a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result (big win), the first special game state is generated, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result (small win), A gaming machine is known that generates a second special game state in which the game value obtainable by the player is less than that in the first special game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-97703 A

However, conventional game results alone have not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest in the game.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to increase the interest in games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition, and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. in
A normal variable winning device in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball;
a control means capable of generating a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning in the normal variable winning device is easier than in the normal game state, and the special game state;
The control means is
when the result of the variable display game is the special result, the specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated;
When the result of the variable display game is a specific result different from the special result and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game corresponding to the specific result without generating the special game state. state can be generated anew, and
Even if the result of the variable display game is the specific result, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the special game state and the specific game state are not newly generated,
irrespective of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, if the result of the variable display game is the specified result, stop displaying the identification information corresponding to the specified result ;
There are a plurality of types of the identification result,
The identification information to be stop-displayed when the result of the variable display game is the specified result is characterized by being different according to the type of the specified result .

According to the present invention, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of a big-hit design, the distribution rate of a small-hit design, and the distribution rate of a support-per design in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure reservation information determination process of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit determination process and small-hit determination process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining the processing during special figure fluctuation of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining a time reduction variation frequency update process according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the production|presentation mode information check process of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during small hit fanfare of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure normal processing transition setting process of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1 and jackpot end setting processing 2 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect performed during a variable display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional production performed after the special-figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" is over. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows an example of a distribution rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure which shows a distribution rate. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the allocation rate in 3rd Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the third embodiment.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for the outflow. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a drive source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). can be

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

On the right side of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to flow down the game balls in the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. do. In addition, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the display device 41 (see FIG. 3) is a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game). It can be performed.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. The board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c, but the normal variable prize device The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted “C” shape by opening.
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) is provided to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area. ) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Also, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of playing balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), and the number detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed is designed not to open a new upper grand prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided. In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 display for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). The game state display unit 56 includes a first game state display unit 56a (C6) for notifying the player of a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player (a method of hitting corresponding to the game state), out of left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A second game state display unit 56b (C7) for notifying that it is in a time saving state (at the time of operation of the variable time shortening function), and notifying that the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state when the game machine 10 is turned on. A third game state display portion 56c (D7) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 has a normal pattern display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a normal pattern suspension display device 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the starting memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. I have it.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation pattern numbers are alternately changed as shown in FIG. LED lamps A0, A2, A4 and A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are turned off) and LED lamps A1, A3, A5 and A7 are lit (LED lamps A0, A2, A7 are turned off). A4 and A6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that they are fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the result mode (special result mode) other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

In the special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, during the execution time (variation time) of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern number is alternately changed, for example, as shown in FIG. LED lamps B0, B2, B4 and B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are extinguished) and LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B7 are lit (LED lamps B0, B2, B7 are turned off). B4 and B6 are extinguished) are alternately switched to indicate that the current is fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending display device 53 indicates the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 reservation display device 54 shows the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) out of the number of winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52, for example. As shown in 4(d), it is displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3). The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

The round display unit 55 turns off all the LEDs (LED lamps D0 to D3) when not in the special game state, and during the special game state, for example, as shown in FIG. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected by . The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in a high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

In the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 57, during the fluctuation display of the general pattern fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in FIG. By alternately switching between the lighting state and the lighting state of the LED lamps D4 and D6, the fluctuation is displayed. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that it is a hit. Any one of them (for example, the LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate the failure.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of balls that have not been digested out of the number of passing balls of the general pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57 (the number of normal pattern starting memories = the number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 has an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, etc. A normal power supply unit. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing An interface chip that is connected to an out-ball detection switch 32a to be detected, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. (Proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. be done. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and the detection signal of the game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10, etc., and the detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12, etc. of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position, and the game machine is powered on while operating (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch 112 to set the probability setting value. can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device. Although displayed in 153, it becomes a probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122 , 123 , 124 and 126 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and general electrical solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output, and the currently selected This is a port for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays probability setting values.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the fifth driver 138e as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V can be driven.
Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate The switch 34a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) from the ball shooting device toward the game area 32 . The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game region 32 and enter the game region 32 is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the first special variable winning apparatus 38 or the second special variable winning apparatus 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37, and a first special variable winning Players can aim to win a prize through the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general winning port 35 arranged to the right of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50 . In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 57 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the normal figure display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. may be configured.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the state of the result of the loss on the normal pattern display device 57 .

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) Along with storing, a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111C as first start memory and second start memory. And, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and in the display device 41 of the center case 40 Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) special figure 1 variable display game ( 1st special figure fluctuation display game) execution control, and special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning area) It constitutes execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means changes the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. are configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 . In addition, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (eg 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved is A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the first 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X10; Y). X11), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM It is determined whether the value of area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. That is, when the game machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is provided by outputting a voice by
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the process proceeds to step X41 to recover from the power failure. Perform the processing when recovery is normal.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is ON (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, a command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b The fact that the probability setting value is being confirmed is notified by outputting voice by

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) of the timer interrupt processing when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at the time of power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not off (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). Returning, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 7 and 8) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. During the period from the interrupt enabling process (step X32) to the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set performs power failure recovery processing (step X41) for saving initial values at power failure recovery in areas to be initialized (for example, power failure inspection area, checksum area, and area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area (work area and stack area) for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) are cleared. Without doing, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. It should be noted that in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure After saving the initial value (start value) of (big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number), the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number)) in a predetermined area of RWM (step X48), interrupts are permitted. (Step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, and hit random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. ing. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the interrupt process. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, and hit random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, and the hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, the interrupt prohibiting process (step X51) is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number update process in step X50 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being converted

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. and an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to transfer the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , the lever solenoid 38f, the general electric solenoid 37c), and the like (step X105). When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106), random number update processing 1 (step X107), and random number update processing 2 (step X108) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the special figure variation display game, the normal figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the normal figure variation display game X114) is performed, and the segment LED editing process (step X115) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content is performed. conduct.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) of checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and determination of whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the special game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is performed. A game result pre-determination is carried out to determine in advance the game result based on the prize winning at the stage before the start of the figure fluctuation display game.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls is monitored by the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower A process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 39a is performed. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A10) is performed.

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of big win and the big prize winning opening of each big win. Processing during special figure display (step A11) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A12) is performed.
At step A8, when the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big winning round is the final round, the ending command is set, and the big winning opening remains. A large winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A8, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A16) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A8, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for setting the ending command and performing small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. . Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104 ).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and transmit the command to the effect control device 300 Effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal variable prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A109), perform hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110), and check whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112). It shifts to the processing of A114 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special The starting port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special figure start switch common processing, first, of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a, information on the number of winnings to the start switch to be monitored is sent to the game machine 10. Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to an external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure holding (start memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), and save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139).

Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).
Next, a small winning design random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A144).

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the special figure starting opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, and starts the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 13, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information of losing is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and a small hit design prepared in step A143 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A167).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A169), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). determination of whether or not) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. That is, when the starting condition is not established although the special figure fluctuation display game can be started, a customer waiting demonstration command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, at step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302). Then, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A305; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306). Then, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 15(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A321), and the first To determine whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big hit flag 1 for deciding whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or not. Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the target.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second To determine whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big win flag 2 for deciding whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. Big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 16 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or cross key 29 is performed. Inputs from the production button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this production button input processing, when there is an input from the production button 25 or the cross key 29, processing for changing the contents of production is performed. .

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting changeable ranges of LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change LED and liquid crystal brightness, volume, and the like (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the reel 6 is performed, and the board for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 17 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 18 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game]
A special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28 .
For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 . , then stop and display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
Decoration special figure fluctuation display game in which the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) , the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first starting memory one-on-one, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. game), the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds one-to-one with the second start memory, and the second start in which the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display is stored first It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prediction such as the variation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display part 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided.

19 and 20 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big hit". FIG. 19 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 20 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 19(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing" (the LED lamp A0 is turned on and the LED lamps A1 to A7 are turned off mode). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 19 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also "off" result mode (LED lamp B0 is turned on and LED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off) and It's becoming

Also, here, since it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so in the display device 41, the first The numerical value of the starting memory number display section 85a is "1", and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". 0 decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure reservation" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off ( (See FIG. 4 (d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 corresponds to "no special figure reservation" (the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) reference)).

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, The numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) See))).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbols) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display section 81, and the left area of the second decoration game display section 82, The variable display of the identification information (small pattern) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. In addition, the variation display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, the mode corresponding to "varying" (the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit and alternately) (see FIG. 4(b)) starts. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game start, but the variation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the variation time When the time elapses, the variable display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the number of decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 53 The display mode of changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t11), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the special game state, and thereafter, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 81 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the variable time. The 2 decoration game display section 82 reappears. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 19(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t13). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t13 to t14). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 19(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases (t14 to t15) during this low-speed variation, and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 19(f) is performed ( t15-t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 19(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t16). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 19G, the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. , the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 19(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 20 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 20, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts slow fluctuation, and the identification information (right pattern) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display The timing at which the identification information (medium pattern) displayed in the area starts to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15". Also, "t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (low-speed fluctuation starts) is "t16" and "t17." between Further, "t17" is the timing at which the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, "t18" is the timing at which the right symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18" and "t19" are the timings at which the middle symbol starts to temporarily stop. is between

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t19), as shown in FIGS. The game result is displayed in the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 19(i) is different among FIGS. 19(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is the result mode of the "jackpot".
Therefore, in this case, the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (big hit symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. , Variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51), and variation of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next Display (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, in the case of executing the variable display game, in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the next The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next will be started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51 In a state consistent with the stop pattern, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next, and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next will be started.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device In a state consistent with 52 stop symbols, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next. and will be started.

21 and 22 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "big hit". FIG. 21 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 22 is an example of a timing chart. 21(a) and 21(b) show the same state as FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b), so description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t21), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of the first start memory is 0 and the number of the second start memory is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is played. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t23). When the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 21(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the second start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, from the start of the variable time to the transition effect (effect to display to shift the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) to the start When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (FIGS. 19(a), (b), FIGS. 19(e), (f), FIG. 21(a), ( b)), when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (Fig. 21 ( e), (f)) and the case of executing the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game are the same. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, by differentiating the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory, the decoration special figure being displayed It notifies which of the first starting memory and the second starting memory the graphic starting memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to either the first start memory or the second start memory. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 21(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t23 to t24). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 21(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24 to t25), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 21(f) is performed ( t25-t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 21(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t26). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t26 to t27), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. becomes (t27-t29). As shown in FIG. 21(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 22 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24 to t29), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t29), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 21(i) is different among FIGS. 21(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "missing", as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, at the start of the next special figure 2 variation display game (t23 to At t24), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, when executing the 2-variation display game, the stop symbols (minor winning symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are displayed. In a state inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. Become.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation display is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed first, then the “losing” result mode may be displayed, or the “losing” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result.) There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 23 and 24 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "big win". FIG. 23 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 24 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 23(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 23(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "missing".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the second start memory number display part 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the numerical value of the first start memory number display portion 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t31), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "big win". It is "333", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 23(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the first start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85a changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (see FIG. 23(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t33). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t33 to t34) , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 23(d)). maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t31 to t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34 to t35), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 23(f) is performed ( t35-t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 23(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t36). becomes (t37-t39). As shown in FIG. 23(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t38).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 24 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t39), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 23(i) is different among FIGS. 23(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, at the start of the next special figure 1 variation display game (t33 to At t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "jackpot". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, in the case of executing the 1-variation display game, the stop symbols (minor winning symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 are displayed. is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (hit symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. Become.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation display is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game The result (“hit” result mode) may be displayed first, then the “losing” result mode may be displayed, or the “losing” result mode may be displayed without displaying the previous game result.) There is a need to. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 are inconsistent with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot". FIG. 25 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 26 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 25(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 25(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t41), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the results modes of "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of the first start memory is 0 and the number of the second start memory is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 25(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the second start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 25(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 25(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t44 to t45), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 25(f) is performed ( t45-t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 25(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t46). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t46 to t47). (t47-t49). As shown in FIG. 25(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 26 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44-t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here the special figure 2 indicator 52) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t49), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 25(i) is different among FIGS. 25(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in FIG. It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, at the start of the next special figure 2 variation display game (t43 ~ t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "probability variable big hit" Similarly, in the case of executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 2 display 52 symbol) is inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next It will start.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of the display device 52 does not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "regular jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if one of the "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot" and the other one is set as the "second jackpot", the stop symbol will be the same. The variable display of the next game is started in a state of inconsistency.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 2 variation display game is executed, the variation display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of "probability variation jackpot"), or the result of "probability variation jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area). If game balls do not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is the normal jackpot, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state is reached.

FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 27 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 28 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 27(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 27(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variable jackpot".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the second start memory number display part 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game starts on the display device 41, and the display is collectively displayed. In the device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the numerical value of the first start memory number display portion 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts (t51), as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 27(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the first start The numerical value of the stored number display section 85a changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the change time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222" (see FIG. 27(d)), as shown in FIGS. The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t53 to t54). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 27(d)). maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t51 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 27(f) is performed ( t55-t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 27(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t56). During this low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state occurs. (t57-t59). As shown in FIG. 27(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 28 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Also, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) The display mode is maintained in a mode corresponding to "fluctuating".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t59), the variable display ends on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. The game results are displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display portion 84 display) disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game progresses in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 27(i) is different among FIGS. 27(a) to (i). Specifically, when the game result is "win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in FIG. 27(i) is "win". It becomes one of the modes, and the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 becomes one mode of the result mode of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50. Therefore, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, at the start of the next special figure 1 variation display game (t53 ~ t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variable jackpot".

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (variable jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display device 51 ), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Similarly, in the case of executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) of the first ornament game display unit 81 and the second ornament game display unit 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the special figure 1 display 51 symbol) is inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next It will start.

That is, when the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of the display device 51 does not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game will be started.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot" and the other is referred to as the "second jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if one of the "10R jackpot", "7R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot" and the other one is set as the "second jackpot", the stop symbol will be the same. The variable display of the next game is started in a state of inconsistency.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, the variable display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of "probability variation jackpot"), or the result of "probability variation jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 are inconsistent with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first When the stop symbols of the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 are matched with the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the matching state remains. Start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure remains in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the 1 variation display game and the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second display device 41 When the stop pattern of the 2 decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 are matched, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game remains in the matching state. And start the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variation display game and the special figure will remain in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game in FIG. 2 is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching If there is
Also, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are not consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are not consistent at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching. If there is no

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case of executing the display game has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "big hit", the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "big hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing a variable display game, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display where the result is "missing" Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to the game, it is "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "not matching", the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "hit "When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 21 and 22), and the result mode of "missing" on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is stopped and the result is "hit" Special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 24), and collective display device 50 Special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 52 and the result is "second big hit" (see FIGS. 25 and 26), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "second big hit "When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 27 and 28), but "if not consistent" is limited to these cases. not. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "hit" and the result is "loss" special figure 1 variation display game is followed by special figure 2 variation When the display game is executed, or when the result mode of "either one of the big hit or the small win" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "big hit or small win" When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game which is "either one of the hits", it is also "not consistent".

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. The high-speed fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area start high-speed fluctuation (the low-speed fluctuation ends) at the same time. End (start slow variation).
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26 and 28, the effect control device 300 stops displaying a desired result mode (here, "424") on the first decoration game display section 81. , the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 is set at the start of high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46, t56). ).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20, 22, and 24, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "333", the variation display starting from "333" is started (t14, t24, t34). Then, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display starting from "333" from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the large pattern high speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t35). A first replacement process for replacing with variable display is executed. In addition, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode, the game result and the remaining fluctuation time (t16-t19, t26-t29, t36-t39), A second replacement process is executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the variable pattern (whether or not a reach state occurs, etc.).

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 changes the variable display starting from "222" to the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t45, t55). A first replacement process is performed to replace the . Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t46, t56), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed as the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t46 to t49, t56 to t59), and the fluctuation pattern (reach state A second replacement process is executed to replace with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the presence or absence of occurrence, etc.).
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 18).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of replacing the large symbol may be one, and in that case, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols (or after the start of the high-speed variation of the large symbols and before the end of the high-speed variation, the large symbols (may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation), the fluctuation display starting from the result form of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result form calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement It is better to process. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decoration game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. If the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, when the high-speed variation of the large symbols ends, the large symbols (for example, the left and right symbols) that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 are displayed in a desired reach mode (desired You may perform a replacement process to replace with a reach pattern).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbols) of the second decorative game display section 82 starts to fluctuate at high speed (starts fluctuating display) at the same time in the left area, the right area, and the middle area. At the same time as the region, the high-speed fluctuation ends (finishes the fluctuation display).
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26 and 28, the effect control device 300 stops displaying a desired result mode (here, "424") on the second decoration game display section 82. , the identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 is replaced at the end of the high speed variation (t19, t29, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, when the high-speed variation of the small symbols ends, a third replacement process is performed to replace the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 18).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. When the small symbols are replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols, a first replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode. A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement processing for replacing the small symbols, the second replacement processing for replacing the small symbols is performed after the first replacement processing, or alternatively, the small symbols are replaced at high speed. It is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time, or may be multiple times. If the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Moreover, when the number of times that the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process should be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (eg, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (eg, t23 to t24, t33 to t34, t43 to t44, t53 to t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (eg, t24 to t25, t34 to t35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55) are the same.
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t15 to t16) and "not matched" (eg, t25 to t16). t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched" (for example, t26 to t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t17 to t18) and "not matched" (eg, t27 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t28 to t29, t38 to t39, t48 to t49, t58 to t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation, and the time from the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation, the time from the start of the large pattern temporary stop display to the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation, and the large pattern reach By making the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "if it is consistent" and "if it is not consistent", start the fluctuation display in an inconsistent state It is possible to set the variation time for the case of the display to be the same as the variation time for the case where the variation display is started in the matching state. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special game state when the mode is set, and is a first variable display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition (a prize in a start winning port 36) among the start conditions as a variable display game. First variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variation display game), and establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions as a variation display game (to normal variation winning device 37 Control the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means and the second variable display means a game control means (game control device 100) that corresponds to a variable display game and variably displays an identification pattern (large pattern); a second decoration game for variably displaying patterns (small patterns); an effect display means (display device 41) capable of displaying; and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means; When the second variable display game is executed after the first variable display game, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the effect display means stopped and displayed at the start of the second variable display game. There is a case where the result mode of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is inconsistent, and in such a case, processing is performed to bring these result modes into a consistent state. The game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game, and the effect control means controls the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. ) to start the variable display of identification symbols (see FIGS. 21 and 25).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) and the second If the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is not consistent, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are performed in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the match is not made, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the special game state that occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode ("lost" result mode) And, the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is 0, and the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) The number of starting memory (second starting memory) to be the execution right is one or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100), after the end of the special game state, the second From a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (the effect control device 300) After the end of the game state, as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started. (See FIGS. 21 and 25).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41) is a winning pattern, and the stopped pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the game can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. pattern, and when the stop pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is changed to the special result mode is not limited to the "winning" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of the "big win" among the result modes of the "hit", or only the result mode of the "minor win" among the result modes of the "hit". It may be only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, only the result mode of "10R jackpot" among the result modes of "hit" may be used, or only the result mode of "7R hit" among the result modes of "hit" may be used. , Only the result mode of "2R hit" may be included in the result mode of "hit".

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300), in a state in which the starting memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stored, It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the number of second starting memories is 1 or more, the number of first starting memories does not have to be 0 (that is, the number of first starting memories is 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (second It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories) is 1 or more, but the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0" does not need to be satisfied.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the first starting memory number must be greater than or equal to one and the second starting memory number must be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (second The number of starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. ” must be satisfied.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the second starting memory number should be greater than or equal to one and the first starting memory number should be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (first The number of starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more. ” must be satisfied.

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the number of first starting memories is one or more, the number of second starting memories does not have to be zero (that is, the number of second starting memories may be one or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) became the special result mode, the starting memory (first It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the number of starting memories) is 1 or more, but the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 0" does not need to be satisfied.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game). (the other of the games) may be executed in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that are the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is possible to configure so that the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed in the order in which it is stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more. and the case where the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game, and in these cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means changes the display of the identification information in the second variable display game from a state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode. and start
After the end of the special game state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to initiate a floating display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. If the stopped symbol on the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the A low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols can be identified and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify, and the identification symbol fluctuation display in the first decoration game corresponding to the second fluctuation display game is possible. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means at the start of the second variation display game and the effect display. The result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14-t16) and when it is not consistent (t24-t26, t34-t36, t44-t46, t54-56). and can be configured to be identical.
By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be set to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the information (large pattern) to the start of the low speed fluctuation through the high speed fluctuation is different between the "matching case" and the "mismatching case". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the The identification pattern can be converted into a high-speed variation display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the start of the variation display of the identification symbol in the second decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game, the variation display is performed through the high-speed variation display mode. The time until the end (t14-t19, t24-t29, t34-t39, t44-t49, t54-59) is the result of the stop display on the second variable display means at the start of the second variable display game. When the mode and the result mode of the second decoration game stopped and displayed on the effect display means match (t14 to t19), and when they do not match (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49). , t54 to t59).
By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time can be set to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and when the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "matching" and "not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, there is a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed but the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed. There may be a mode in which decoration games are not displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
For example, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game, and a decoration special figure corresponding to the main variation (special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state) In a gaming machine that displays only a variable display game and does not display a decorative special variable display game that corresponds to an irregular variation (a special variable display game that is determined not to be the main variation in each gaming state), the main variation is switched. At the start of the first special figure variation display game, the stop pattern of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed for the first time, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 There is a case where it is not consistent with the stop pattern. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41, and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not be consistent. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the game machine is capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the main variation provided in the display area of the display device 41 is a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation. In the gaming machine that displays on the display unit and displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation on the irregular variation display unit provided in the display area of the display device 41, the main variation is switched and the first feature At the start of the figure variation display game, the stop symbols on the main variation display portion of the display device 41 and the stop symbols on the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed for the first time, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 may not match. . In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not match. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that a support hit is provided as a result of the special figure variation display game.

FIG. 29 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29(a), for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game, ie, a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(b), for example, the big hit is a high probability A big hit in which a high probability A big hit pattern is stopped and displayed as a big hit pattern (a result mode of the big hit), and a high probability high hit in which a high probability B big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. There are three types of B jackpot and normal jackpot in which normal jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29(c), for example, as a small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning), the small winning A pattern is stopped and displayed, and the small winning B pattern is stopped and displayed. There are two types of small hits B. Also, as shown in FIG. 29(d), for example, as shown in FIG. There are three types of support hit B and support hit C in which the support hit C symbol is stopped and displayed.

The probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (probability variation operating area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability variation state) after the end of the special game state. Possibility of inflow of game balls is low, indicating that it is difficult to enter a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area). If game balls do not flow in, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the variable probability A jackpot and the variable probability B jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round and the specific area (variable probability operation area) is opened. conduct. Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area). Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round, and short opening with V is performed to open a specific area (probability variable operation area). Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (small hit game state) based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

FIG. 29(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Also, in FIG. 29(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", "setting 2", and "setting 3". can be different. Also, in FIG. 29(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6". can be different. Also, for example, the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 1" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 2" are the first distribution rate (for example, low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190/65536) and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 3" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 4" are the second distribution rate (for example, low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/65536), The distribution rate of the jackpot at "setting 5" and the distribution rate of the jackpot at "setting 6" may be set as the third distribution rate (for example, low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536).

Also, in FIG. 29(a), the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different. In addition, in FIG. 29(a), the distribution rate of the small hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), but different It's okay to be there.
Also, in FIG. 29(a), the distribution rate per support is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different. In addition, in FIG. 29(a), the distribution rate per support is higher when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the low probability state than in the case of the high probability state. The probability state and the high probability state may be the same, or the low probability state may be lower than the high probability state. In addition, it is also possible to set the distribution rate of the support win in the high probability state to "0" and win the lottery for the support win only in the low probability state.

FIG. 29(b) is an example of distribution ratios for the types of jackpots. In FIG. 29(b), the allocation rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 29(b), the distribution rate of the big hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 29(c) is an example of the distribution rate of the small hit type. In FIG. 29(c), the allocation rate of the small hit type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Also, in FIG. 29(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 29(d) is an example of distribution ratios for types of support hits. In FIG. 29(d), the distribution rate of the type of support hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
Also, in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 1 is higher than the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 2, but the distribution rate of per support C in special figure 1 The distribution rate of C may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, or may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2. In addition, in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution rate of the support hit A in the special figure 1 and the distribution rate of the support hit B in the special figure 1 are the same, but they may be different. Also, in FIG. 29(d), the distribution rate of the support per A in the special figure 2 and the distribution rate of the support per B in the special figure 2 are the same, but they may be different.

Since the flowchart of the main processing of this embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment (FIGS. 7 and 8), illustration thereof is omitted.
In step X48 of the main processing of this embodiment, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding initial random numbers (in this embodiment, Initial value of the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern (big winning pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), the random number that determines the hitting of the general pattern (hit random number), the random number that determines the support winning pattern (supporting pattern random number)) It is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as (start value).

In this embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, the small hit pattern random numbers, the hit random numbers, and the support hit pattern random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and support hit random number are determined by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is the unit of processing. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and support per pattern random number, each time the random number makes a round, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. method” is used. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and supporter pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Also, the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 9), so the illustration is omitted.
In the random number update process 1 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the initial value of the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the support per pattern random number (start value) is updated.
In addition, in this embodiment, the support per symbol random number is provided, but it is also possible not to provide the support per symbol random number. In that case, the big hit pattern random number may be used to select the support winning pattern from a plurality of types, or the small winning pattern random number may be used to select the support winning pattern from a plurality of types. Also good.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a first specific game state ST11, a second specific game state ST12, and a third specific game state ST13. In addition, as the game state, there is a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win). is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result (jackpot) to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the game In the state, the main starting area which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST14 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST11 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. And there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the latent mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST14 because of the general power support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST14 and the third game state ST11 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13, and the special Of the variable probability big hits to be in a high probability state after the end of the game state, when the variable probability A big win is the one, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST12, and when the variable probability B big win is the big win, the process shifts to the first specific game state ST11. .

Specifically, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation A jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (probability variation operation area ) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, it shifts to the second specific game state ST12. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST11 after the end of the special game state. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST13. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state, is set, and the special figure fluctuation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST11. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the normal game state ST14 may be entered.
In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST12. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, it may be shifted to the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game state ST13).

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST13, the game shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the number of times the normal jackpot is supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST12, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the second specific game state ST12, the game moves to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the variable probability A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of support times of the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, the third specific game state Move to ST13. In addition, in the first specific game state ST11 and the second specific game state ST12, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST12 after the end of the special figure variation display game. to That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived is the special It does not go through the game state. Therefore, for example, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the first specific game state ST11 (high probability no support), after the special figure variation display game ends, via the special game state It is possible to shift to the second specific game state ST12 (with high probability support).

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the third specific game is performed until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), and in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12) 20 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game moves to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "20 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "20 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), and 100 without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12). When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit C of the support hit is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST13 (or the 2nd specific game state ST12), and in the 3rd specific game state ST13 (or the 2nd specific game state ST12) 1000 without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, in the case of shifting to the chance mode via the special game state and the case of shifting to the chance mode without passing through the special game state, the effect executed during the chance mode (using the display device 41 etc. production by display, production by sound using speakers 19a, 19b, etc., production by light using frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc., production by movable members using board production device 44, frame production device, etc. , at least one of them) are made to have different presentation modes. That is, the production mode of the production executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable A jackpot) and the production mode executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hits (support hits A to C). Since the performance mode is different from the performance mode, it is determined whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the big win or the derivation of the support hit depending on the performance mode of the performance executed during the chance mode. can suggest.

In this embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), that is, when the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13, the number of times of support to reset the support count corresponding to the new support hit.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B". ), if the support hit A is derived at the 10th rotation, the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 to 20.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31(b), in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12) that has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", When the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation, the number of remaining supports is changed from 10 times to 20 times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31(a), when the remaining support count is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the production mode changes from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to support hit B) to another Switching to chance mode (chance mode A (chance mode corresponding to support win A) or chance mode different from chance mode A or chance mode B). Also, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31(b), when the number of remaining supports is changed from 10 times to 20 times, the production mode is switched from chance mode B to another chance mode.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31, chance mode B may be continued even after the number of remaining support times is changed to 20 times.
Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the supporter hit C). , As shown in FIG. 31, when the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit A, switching the production mode from the chance mode B to the chance mode A results in a rank down, so the number of remaining supports. The chance mode B may be continued (or switched to a chance mode different from the chance mode A or the chance mode B) even after is changed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 32(a), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific In the game state ST12), when the support hit A is derived in the tenth rotation, the number of remaining support is changed from 90 times to 110 times (=90 times+20 times), and for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the right figure, in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12) that has transitioned with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win B", the support win is reached at the 90th rotation. When A is derived, the number of remaining supports may be changed from 10 times to 30 times (=10 times+20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is You may make it change to the said upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 32(a), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining support count is changed. The chance mode B may be continued even after the Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 32(b), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific In the game state ST12), when the support win A is derived in the tenth rotation, the support count corresponding to the new support win is 20 times, which is less than the remaining support count (90 times). While the number of times of support is not changed, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. In the second specific game state ST12), when the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation, the support count corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, which is greater than the remaining support count (10 times). Therefore, the remaining support count may be changed from 10 times to 20 times.

In this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 32(b), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining support count may be changed. The chance mode B may be continued even after is changed. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, the effect performed during execution of the support winning game (the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support winning") is a special effect (described later) such as a battle effect.
In addition, the game machine 10 configured to adopt the greater one of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support win (whichever is more advantageous for the player) (that is, the control shown in FIG. 32(b) is performed. In the gaming machine 10), a special effect is provided only during execution of a support winning game in which the number of times of support is adopted (for example, a special figure variation display game in which the result in the right diagram of FIG. 32(b) is "support winning A"). Even if the special effect is not performed during the execution of the support winning game in which the number of times of support is not adopted (for example, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result in the left diagram of FIG. 32(b) is "support winning A") good.
The support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is a variation pattern that takes into account the execution of a special effect during the support hit game, so the special effect is executed during the support hit game. If not, it is better to make adjustments such as making the temporary stop display time of the game result longer than in the case of executing the special effect.

Further, in the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 32(b), as a result of the support win game in which the number of support is not adopted, the support win symbol (here, the support win A symbol) is stopped and displayed. Not limited. For example, as a result of a win-win-support game in which the number of times of support is not adopted, instead of win-win-support symbols, losing symbols may be stopped and displayed. In the game machine 10 configured to adopt the larger one of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support win (whichever is more advantageous for the player), the effect control device 300 receives the received signal from the game control device 100. Based on the command, it is determined whether or not the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit. Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, the number of times of support based on the decoration special figure command for notifying the stop pattern on the display device 41, and the time reduction for notifying the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of support) It is judged that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit when compared with the support number based on the variable number command. Then, when it is determined that the game control device 100 determines not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit, as a result of the support hit game, the pattern specified by the decoration special figure command (the new support hit In place of the support hit symbol corresponding to ), the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the support hit derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support) is the support hit A, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the supporter win A may be derived during the chance mode, the supporter win B may be derived during the chance mode, and the supporter win C may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is the SP reach of the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss" is the same as the fluctuation pattern that occurs. That is, SP reach occurs in the support winning game. In addition, in the present embodiment, if the result is a special figure variation display game other than "support hit", and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, the special figure Special effects such as battle effects (to be described later) can be executed even during execution of the figure-variable display game.
In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executable even during execution of a special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, a special effect such as a battle effect (described later) may be used exclusively for the support winning game, and may not be executed during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a "big win" or "lost". .

In addition, the support hit variation pattern may be the same as a variation pattern that does not cause SP reach among the variation patterns selected when the result is a "big hit" or "loss", or it may be the same as a support hit game. may be a variation pattern of
For example, if you are not in the chance mode, you can select a variation pattern dedicated to the support game, and if you are in the chance mode, you can use a variation pattern that is combined with a special figure variation display game other than the support game (for example, the result is By selecting a variation pattern that causes SP reach among the variation patterns selected in the case of "big hit" or "losing", the dedicated variation pattern has a longer variation time than the shared variation pattern. may be set as a variation pattern. As a result, the variation time of the support winning game that is executed when the chance mode is not on is longer than the variation time of the support winning game that is performed when the chance mode is on. During the fluctuation time of the support winning game, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection, effect explanation, etc. related to the chance mode (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), and at the start of the chance mode It is possible to have a connection with an effect to be executed (fanfare effect, etc.).

Alternatively, the stop display time of the support winning game may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the support winning game. As a result, during the stop display time of the support game, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection and production explanations related to the chance mode, so the production (fanfare production, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode You can have a connection with

Alternatively, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode. Specifically, for example, when the result of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is "loss", the result is "loss" as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game. A variation pattern with a relatively long variation time among the variation patterns selected in the case, or a variation pattern dedicated to the first special figure variation display game by shifting to the chance mode may be selected. As a result, when the chance mode is started, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection, effect explanation, and the like related to the chance mode. In addition, this makes it possible to accumulate the second starting memory before the game is switched to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it becomes the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second start memory by, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, and the game is played so as to be advantageous for the player. can proceed.

The control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below.
As described above, the flowchart of the main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment (FIGS. 7 and 8), so illustration thereof is omitted. Also, the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 9), so the illustration is omitted.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 33 shows the hardware random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the starting switch monitoring process of this embodiment. Note that the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment (FIG. 11), so illustration thereof is omitted.
In this hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning opening 37), the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set ( Step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a (step A122).
If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37), set winning information for the starting opening to be monitored (step A126), and obtain a hardware random number. End the process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
In this embodiment, the game control device 100 executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 34 instead of the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. In this special figure start opening switch common processing, after performing the processing of step A144, the support per symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A149a), and the prepared support per symbol random number is stored in the support per symbol random number storage area of RWM. After performing the saving process (step A149b), the process proceeds to step A145.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
In this embodiment, the game control device 100 executes the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. 35 instead of the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. In this special figure reservation information determination process, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), it is a support that determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the support hit determination value. Hit determination processing (step A151a) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A151b; N), stop symbol information of losing is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is per support (step A151b; Y), the support per symbol random number check table is set (step A151c), and the support per symbol prepared in step A149a of the special figure start opening switch common processing Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A151d), and the process proceeds to step A164.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 36(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, since the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment (Fig. 15(a)), the illustration is omitted.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step A362), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step A363). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random value matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A367) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 and saved. Then (step A369), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), it is a support hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the support hit determination value Support hit determination processing (step A370) for determining whether or not is performed.

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A370) is a support hit (step A371; Y), the support hit flag 1 area in which the loss information was saved in step A361 is overwritten with the support hit information and saved. Then (step A372), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A370) is not a support hit (step A371; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 36(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, since the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 15(b)), the illustration is omitted.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare it (step A382), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0 ( Step A383). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A384) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is a big hit (step A385; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A381 (step A386 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value A small hit determination process (step A387) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A389), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), it is a support hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the support hit determination value Support hit determination processing (step A390) for determining whether or not is performed.

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A390) is a support hit (step A391; Y), the support hit information is overwritten in the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A392), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A390) is not a support hit (step A391; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 37(a) shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A402), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value can be changed according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. to set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; N), it is judged whether the probability is high (step A404). And, if the high probability state (step A404; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A405), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A404; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A406), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407) . The upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A409), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 37(b) shows small hit determination processing (steps A367 and A387) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A411). A small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412). If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set the deviation as the judgment result (step A414) and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A414) and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step A415), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

[Support hit determination process]
FIG. 38 shows support hit determination processing (steps A370 and A390) in the above-described jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this support hit determination process, first, a support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the set probability value is set (step A421). The support per upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the support per upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the support per upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. . Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is different for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the support hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the support hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but they may not overlap.

It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the support hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a support hit. By setting the support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit decision value of the support hit decision value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit decision value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value per support is the same value regardless of the probability setting value and probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value per support depending on the probability setting value and probability state can be different. In this case, in the same way as the upper limit judgment value per support, the lower limit judgment value per support table that defines the lower limit judgment value per support for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and used according to the probability state Select and set the lower limit judgment value for each support. Of course, the support hit upper limit determination value table and the support hit lower limit determination value table may be combined into a support hit determination value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428), and end the support hit determination process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the support hit was lost. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the support lower limit judgment value (step A423; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A424). Then, if it is in a high probability state (step A424; Y), set the upper limit judgment value per support in high probability (step A425), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (step A427). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step A424; N), set the upper limit judgment value per support in low probability (step A426), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (Step A427). The support hit upper limit judgment value set here is acquired by referring to the support hit upper limit judgment value table set in step A421 described above.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A428), and end the jackpot judgment processing. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not greater than the support upper limit judgment value (step A427; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process exit.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, since the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment (FIG. 15(a)), the illustration is omitted.
In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A433), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A434). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A440; Y), a special figure A small-hit design random number is loaded from the one-hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A441). Next, the special figure 1 small hit design table is set (step A442), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A443). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A455).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A446; Y), a special figure The per-support symbol random number is loaded from the per-support symbol random number storage area (reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, a special figure 1 per support symbol table is set (step A448), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded support per symbol random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A451), save the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A452), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A455).
Also, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A453), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A454), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A456), and production command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), and the special figure Clear the 1 small per symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (step A460), clear the random number storage area per special figure 1 support (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (step A461), special figure 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. Since the flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of this execution form is the same as the flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start treatment of 1st execution form (Figure 15 (b)), it abbreviates illustration.
In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A473), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A474). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A475), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A476). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A477), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A478), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A480; Y), a special figure 2. A small-hit design random number is loaded from the small-hit design random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step A482), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A483). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. A corresponding decoration special figure command is prepared (step A495).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A486; Y), a special figure 2. The per-support symbol random number is loaded from the per-support symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number of 1) (step A487). Next, the special figure 2 per support symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded support per symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A491), save the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A492), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A495).
Also, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A493), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A494), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command territory (step A496), production command setting processing (step A497) is done. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), and the special figure Clear the 2 small per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (step A500), clear the special figure 2 per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (step A501), special figure 2 The stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), so illustration is omitted.
In this special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is the small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the support winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for the processing during special figure display as the processing number (step A605), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). Furthermore, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the pattern determination number signal control timer area according to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment. It should be noted that the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), so illustration is omitted.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of RWM. And clear the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A707), and if it is a big hit (step A707; Y), it is related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710), and the round A number upper limit table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708). Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operation device operating signal ON, special symbol 1 winning signal ON) related to the start of the jackpot (special 1 jackpot) of the figure fluctuation display game are RWM. Save in the test signal output data area (step A709), and set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value (“10”, “7” or “2” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A712 ). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepare (step A714), and perform the production command setting process (step A715). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A716), and effect command setting processing (Step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, at step A720, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called definite jackpot, etc.). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time is set corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game, and the big winning opening opening information (step A721), and the set jackpot fanfare time is set. Save in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A723). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared (step A724), and the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is cleared. The illegality monitoring period outside flag is saved (step A725). Thereafter, a fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 determines the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 38 based on whether the result is a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 to the open state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and if it is a small hit (step A727; Y), A test signal (for example, a special symbol 2 small hit signal is turned ON) relating to the start of the second special figure variation display game small hit (special 2 small hit) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , time reduction variation number update processing is performed (step A731).
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). saves a test signal (for example, turning on a special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the first special figure variation display game small hit (special figure 1 small hit) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A729), and a process of updating the number of time reduction fluctuations is performed (step A731).

Next, an effect mode information check process (step A732) regarding the setting of the effect mode is performed, and it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A733).
If the special figure is not in high probability (step A733; N), load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area, prepare (step A734), and perform the effect command setting process (step A735). Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A736), effect command setting processing (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Moreover, when it is in the high probability of a special figure (step A733; Y), it transfers to the process of step A738. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of a small win is not allowed in the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step A738), and the small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting process (step A738) for shifting to the small winning fanfare medium processing A739) is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). If it is per support (step A740; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for transitioning to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure End the display process.
If the support hit flag 2 is not support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is support hit (step A741). If it is per support (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure End the display process.

Moreover, when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A744) is performed. Then, an effect mode information check process (step A745) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation number for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation number for effect and the remaining rotation number for switching preparation are set. matches (step A747). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
When the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed, and the special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, if the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A747; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A748), production command setting processing (step A749) is performed, and special A special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for transferring to the normal figure process is performed, and the process during special figure display ends. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[Processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations]
FIG. 44 shows the time reduction variation count update process (steps A731 and A744) in the above-described special figure display process. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being supported (step A751). Then, if the general electric power is not being supported (step A751; N), the time shortening fluctuation frequency updating process is terminated. Also, if the general electric support is in progress (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation frequency is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation frequency has become "0" (step A753). .

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number updating process is terminated. Also, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A753; Y), a signal relating to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A756), save the normal figure low probability & no time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A757), special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag (step A758). Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation count update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
FIG. 45 shows the effect mode information check process (steps A732, A745) in the above-described special figure display process. In this presentation mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. .

Also, if the next mode transition information is not an update no code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining rotation number is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and the production remaining rotation number in the RWM. Save it in the area (step A777), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and save it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A782), Command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), production command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and production mode information check processing is completed. . As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of rotations before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 46 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display processing. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turning on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turning on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Turn off the variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal design 1 variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save normal pattern low probability & time saving no flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the game state display LED (for example, the third game state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state is extinguished. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the process shift setting process (step A739) during the small hit fanfare in the above-described special figure display process. In this small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small winning fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A811). A812).
Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small win (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output as a big win + a small win). ) is saved in the external information output data area (step A814).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for the major winning opening (step A816).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the process transition setting process during small win fanfare is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-described special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area (step A821), and the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is external information Save in the output data area (step A822). That is, when the support winning pattern stops, only a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is output as the external information signal.
Then, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A824), save the normal figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A825), and maintain the probability state flag In order to have time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) is obtained (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting (step A904) in the jackpot end processing is performed.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (step A831). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the next mode of the production mode set after the special game state is completed. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), the command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A835), and effect command setting processing (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in any of "high probability/time saving" and "low probability/time saving". Although not used in this process, there are a number of other commands that include information on the production mode in addition to "high probability, no time saving" and "low probability, no time saving".
Next, prepare an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number (step A837), perform an effect command setting process (step A838), and issue a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number. Preparations are made (step A839), and effect command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the presentation mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process (steps A743 and A750) in the above-described special figure display process. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852). .
Next, the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process is completed. .

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 50 shows the jackpot ending process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment. The flowchart of the special figure game process of this embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game process of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), so illustration is omitted.
In this jackpot end processing, first, the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is set when the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data (step A901).
If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is high probability data (step A901; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of variation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A905).

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the special game state is completed is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (step A906). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the production mode set after the special game state is shifted to the next mode. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), the command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A910), and effect command setting processing (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of "high probability / time saving", "high probability / no time saving", "low probability / time saving". . Although not used in this process, there are several other commands that include information on the production mode in addition to "low probability / no time saving".
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A914), and effect command setting processing (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, a signal related to the end of the big win (for example, turn off the signal for big win 1, turn off the signal for big win 3, turn off the signal for big win 4) is saved in the external information output data area (step A918), and save the signal related to the end of the big win (for example, , condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 win signal OFF, special symbol 2 win signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A921), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 51(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Since the signal relating to the start of time saving is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal design 1 high probability state signal ON, normal design 1 fluctuation time The shortened state signal is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A933), save the general figure high probability & time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A934), special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure low probability & time saving flag (step A935). After that, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction variation frequency region (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (for example, 100) in the time-saving number-of-time area, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 51(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of a high probability (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start of the high probability is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the start of high probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening The state signal is turned ON, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is turned ON, the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A942). ).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A943), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general figure game mode flag area (step A944), and save the special figure game mode flag area To save the special figure high probability & time saving flag (step A945). After that, the time shortening variation count area is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.
That is, the game control device 100, after the end of the special game state, over a predetermined period of time, normal variable winning device 37 to extend the period of the open state specific game state (time saving state) can be generated specific game It constitutes state generation control means.

FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 show the case of executing a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 52 is an example of display on the display device 41, and FIG. 53 is an example of a timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 ) disappears. In FIG. 52(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 4 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state.

In addition, in FIG. 52(a), the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 . Here, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "support hit A", and that effect , It is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support given is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "346".
Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 4 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Effect of displaying to shift the display to the in-execution memory display section 84) is executed, and the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Here, since a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is changed to the running memory display by the transition effect. While moving to the part 84, the decoration special figure start memory display other than the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is shifted to the left in the memory display part 83 during standby.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. The fluctuation display of starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIGS. The reach state in which the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the variable display area is established, and the reach fluctuation starts (t64).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 52(d) and 53, on the display device 41, a battle effect is started in which the friendly character fights the enemy character (t65). At the start of the battle effect, in order to secure a battle effect display portion for displaying the battle effect within the display area of the display device 41, the left movement display area of the first decorative game display portion 81 is changed to the display area of the display device 41. , the right changing display area of the first decoration game display portion 81 moves to the right end of the display area of the display device 41, and the standby memory display portion 83 and the running memory display portion 84 are hidden. becomes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(e), the result of the battle presentation is reported. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle presentation is "tie". On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "big hit", the result of the battle presentation is "winning of the ally character", and the result of the special figure variation display game being performed is "loss". , the result of the battle effect is "losing of the ally character".

Next, as shown in FIG. 52( f ), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decoration game display section 81 . Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66), as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 memory display) disappears. In this case, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". It is "434".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52(g) and 53, when the stop display time starts (t66), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20 times. An effect of displaying "support 20 times" on the number display section 86) is executed. On the other hand, if the game result is "support win B", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. A performance is performed. In addition, when the game result is "support win C", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 52(g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 3 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t67). When the variable time starts (t67), as shown in FIG. 53, the game shifts to the chance mode. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Also, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "sapo hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the second specific game state ST12.

In this embodiment, the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation configured not to display. Therefore, when it shifts to the chance mode (t67), the main variation switches from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game, so as shown in FIGS. The decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 disappears.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, that is, when it is not in the chance mode (during general electric support), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit during execution Although it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory in 84, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. In addition, when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13, that is, when the chance mode is in progress (during general electricity support), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit during execution Although it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory in 84, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a on the display device 41 changes, as shown in FIG. 52(h).
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 52(i) and 53, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation display of starts.
When the variable display starts (t68), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support granted this time is 20, and the first game (first game) is being executed after the chance mode (general electric support) has started, so as shown in FIG. At the same time, an effect for notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 times (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times left" on the number of times of support display section 86) is executed.

Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 53, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect is executed to notify that the game will enter the chance mode, and then an effect is executed to notify that the chance mode is in progress. During the chance mode (during general electric support), the battle production started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit" is continued, that is, the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit" Since the game ends in a draw and the battle is continued without a settlement, in FIGS. It is running. As a result, it is possible to connect the effects before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 53, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed hitting (for example, an effect displaying "right-handed hit →" (see FIGS. 52(i) and (j)). ) starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. In the device 41, a new decoration special figure start memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. .
Also, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), a battle effect is executed and the number of support times is changed (see FIGS. 31 and 32). Each time the support count is changed, the number of allied characters may be increased or decreased, or the level of the allied characters may be increased or decreased. Specifically, for example, if the support count after the change is less than the support count before the change, the number of allied characters is maintained (or reduced) so that the support count after the change is equal to the support count before the change. If it is more than the number of times, the number of ally characters may be increased, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(k).

In addition, the identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the support per pattern may be composed only of general patterns (designs 1 to 9), or may be composed of general patterns and special patterns (special patterns for support). It may be composed of or may be composed only of special symbols. That is, the support winning symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. As shown, it may be composed of general symbols and special symbols, or may be composed only of special symbols. Further, the support winning symbols stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. It may consist of a general design and a special design, or it may consist of only a special design.

In this embodiment, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game.
FIGS. 54 to 58 show a case where the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "support hit" is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game. 54 to 57 are examples of displays on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 58 is an example of a timing chart.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. The game result is stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "off".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Start, in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , a new decoration special figure start memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays in the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, collective display In the device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes. Here, the new decoration special figure starting memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 .

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. While the game result is stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "235", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. Start, in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t71), as shown in FIGS. The game result is stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 memory display) disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "625", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 1, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. , the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes. Here, since the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, even if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition effect (decoration special Effect of displaying to shift the figure start memory display) is not executed.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. The variable display of the display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the reach variation starts in the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 (t74), and the battle effect is performed in the display device 41. starts (t75), and the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "tie".

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decoration game display section 81. FIG. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. The game result is statically displayed on the game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, and the variable display is terminated on the collective display device 50, and the game result is statically displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. In this case, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". It is "434", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "supporting A".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 55(c) and 58, when the stop display time starts (t76), the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20 times. An effect of displaying "20 times remaining" on the number display section 86) is executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55(c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 that were hidden at the start of the battle effect reappear.
Here, since the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t77). When the variable time starts (t77), as shown in FIG. 58, the game shifts to the chance mode.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 55(d) and 58, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The variable display of starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.

When the variable display starts (t78), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. Here, the number of times of support given this time is 20 times, and the first game (first game) is being executed after the chance mode (general electric support) has started, so FIG. ), an effect for notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the number of times of support display 86) is executed.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 58, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed hitting (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed hit →" (see FIGS. 55(d) and (e)). ) starts.

Also, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 58, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode informing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 55(d), an effect informing that the chance mode will be entered (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode entry screen") is executed. , as shown in FIG. 55(e), an effect for informing that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect for displaying a "chance mode screen") is executed. Here, the first decoration game display section 81 (large pattern) is hidden by the chance mode entry screen or the chance mode screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the screen for entering the chance mode and the screen during the chance mode may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the first decoration game display section 81, or the screen for entering the chance mode and the screen during the chance mode may be displayed on the front side of the chance mode screen. The first decoration game display section 81 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display is hidden at the start of the battle production and redisplayed at the time of design determination. When the pending change effect is executed in the standby memory display part 83 before it is hidden, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display part 83 is hidden at the start of the battle effect and the pattern. When redisplayed at the time of confirmation, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 55(f) to 55(j), it may be re-displayed while the pending change effect is being executed.

Specifically, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 55 (a) and the decoration special figure starting memory at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 55 (a)), while it is a normal display mode at the time of re-display (Fig. 55 (c)) . That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode has been reset.
Also, in FIG. 55(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 55(h) , It is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 55(f)), and is also in the specific display mode at the time of re-display (Fig. 55(h)).

Further, when re-displaying with the pending change effect being executed, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of re-display is, for example, as shown in FIGS. , or may be different from the presentation mode before non-display, as shown in FIGS. 56(a) to 56(e).
Specifically, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is the same before non-display (Fig. 55(f)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 55(h)). In other words, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before non-display (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Also, in FIG. 56(a), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 56(c) , It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. Among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is before non-display (Fig. 56 (a)) and when re-displaying (Fig. 56 (c)), but the display mode (here, shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result is different before non-display (Fig. 56(a)) and during re-display (Fig. 56 (c)) is different.

The battle production is not only started during the execution of the special figure variation display game with the result of "support hit", but also starts during the execution of the special figure variation display game with the result other than "support hit". is possible, but if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game that was being executed at the start of the battle production is "support hit" and if it is not "support hit", whether or not there is a pending change effect at the time of reappearance Alternatively, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance may be changed.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden during the execution of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle production) and at the start of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game ( When the pattern is confirmed), and if the pending change effect is executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before it is hidden, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "support If it is a "hit", as shown in FIGS. 55(a) to (e), it is displayed again without executing the pending change effect, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "big hit", it is shown in FIG. 56 ( Similar to a) to (e), redisplay in the state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is different from before non-display), and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "missing", FIG. 55 ( As in f) to (j), it may be redisplayed in a state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is the same as before non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular variation is configured not to display, but is not limited to this. For example, the standby memory display unit 83 can display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation, and the running memory display unit 84 only displays the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation. Instead, it may be possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation.
In that case, when the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to irregular fluctuation, for example, in FIG. 57 (a) ~ (e) As shown in FIG. 57, the pending change effect may be executed in the running memory display unit 84. For example, as shown in FIGS. You may choose not to execute it.

It should be noted that the pending change effect executed in the standby pending display unit 83, by displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 in a specific display mode, the decoration special figure start memory It is a production that suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the display and the result of the prediction such as the fluctuation pattern.
In addition, the pending change effect executed in the running memory display unit 84 is displayed by displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 in a specific display mode. It is an effect that suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the display (the special figure fluctuation display game currently being executed) and the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 57 (c), and the decoration special figure starting memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. Is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is the same before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 57(c)) and after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 57(e)). ing. In other words, the transition is made to the in-execution storage display section 84 in a state in which the display mode before the transition is inherited.
It should be noted that the display mode after shifting to the in-execution storage display section 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before shifting. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decoration special figure starting memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is taken over even after the transition, suggesting the look-ahead result A display mode (for example, a shape) different from the display mode for the transition may be different before and after the transition.

Also, in FIG. 57(h), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. 57(j) are the same It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 57 (h)), while after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 57 (j)) has a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84 .

In addition, since only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 is the first start memory In the case of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to, the decoration special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts, and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the first starting memory generated before the chance mode starts is not digested during the chance mode, the pending change effect for the first starting memory is performed before the chance mode starts. If it has been executed, when the chance mode ends, it may reappear with the display mode taken over before the start of the battle effect.

55(d), (i), FIG. 56(d), FIG. 57(d), and (i), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit 84 during execution display the chance mode entry screen. hidden in, but not limited to. Specifically, for example, the screen for entering the chance mode has a size that does not overlap the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 (including the decoration special figure start memory display) (for example, the same size as the chance mode screen) , or a standby storage display section 83 and an execution storage display section 84 may be displayed on the near side of the screen for entering the chance mode.
Further, when the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation, it is stored during standby. The decoration special figure start memory display of the display unit 83 (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) may be hidden. That is, in the examples shown in FIGS. 55(a), (f), FIG. 56(a), FIG. Decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) may be hidden.

In the example shown in FIGS. 54 to 58, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is " It is a result mode of "missing", and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is a result mode of "missing". Therefore, in a state in which the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern (loose pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the special figure 2 Variation display of the variation display game (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (first decoration game display unit 81 and second decoration Variable display on the game display unit 82) is started.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 match If not, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" is not limited to the battle effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, in addition to (or in place of) the battle effect during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win", a pseudo continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbols may be executed. .
FIG. 60 shows an example of a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect performed during a special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support win C". Since FIG. 60(a) shows the same state as FIG. 55(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special-figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the pseudo-continuous effect is started in the first decorative game display section 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 60(b), first, a support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "4") indicating the number of support to be given are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support win C", the number of times of support actually given is 1000 times, but here, the number of times of support given is less than the number of times of support actually given. A special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support that suggests that it will be temporarily stopped is displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be provided is 20 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the suggested number of times is displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the re-variation display of the large pattern starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A symbol (here, "5") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 80 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(e), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60(e), the re-variation display of the large pattern starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. A symbol (here, "6") is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 900 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(g), the re-varying display of the large symbols is started, and then, as shown in FIG. , the pseudo continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 stop displaying the game result. In this case, since the game result is "support win C", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "support win C". It is "656".

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(i), when the stop display time starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. Effect of displaying "Support 1000 times!"
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, the game shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 60(j).

In FIG. 60, the case of executing the pseudo-continuous performance during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous performance is the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "support hit" It can also be executed during the game. The same applies to special effects (for example, battle effects) other than the pseudo continuous effects.
Also, in FIG. 60, the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous effect is a special figure in which the result is "support hit A". It can be executed during a variable display game, and it is also possible to execute it during a special figure variable display game in which the result is "support hit B".

In the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit A", for example, FIGS. 60(d) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the large symbols change again. The display starts, after which the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("support hit A" result mode is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82). "434") is stopped, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", for example, FIGS. 60(f) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the large symbol changes again. The display starts, then, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. After that, the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("support hit B" result mode is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82). "545") is stopped, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 60(b), (e), and (f), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support times are temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area of the first decoration game display section 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbols for suggesting the number of times of support may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support that is less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, the special effect (for example, battle effect, pseudo-continuous effect) performed during the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "support hit" is only when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11. Instead, it can be executed also when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13. In other words, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether the chance mode is in progress (general electric support is in progress).

Also, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is "support hit" starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified, but the stop display time The number of times of support notified inside may be different from the number of times of support actually provided. Specifically, for example, during the stop display time, it is notified that the number of support times that is less than the number of support actually given is given, and an additional effect that adds the number of support times during the chance mode is executed. good.
FIG. 61 shows an example of an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit C". Since FIG. 61(a) shows the same state as FIG. 55(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIG. When the variation time of the figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, since the game result is "supporter win C", the display device 41 displays "767" as the supporter win symbol, which is common to "supporter win A", "supporter win B", and "supporter win C". ” is displayed temporarily or stopped. Of course, not only when the game result is "supporter hit C", but also when the game result is "supporter hit A" or "supporter win B", the result common to each "supporter hit" as a supporter win symbol It is possible to temporarily stop display or stop display of the mode "767".

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(c), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and the number of support to be given is first notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C" and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000, but the number of times of support given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying “20 remaining times” on the number-of-supports display unit 86) is being executed.
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, it shifts to the chance mode.

When the game shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode informing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 61(d), an effect informing that the chance mode will be entered (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode entry screen") is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(e), an effect for informing that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect for displaying a "chance mode screen") is executed.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIGS. 61 (f) and (g) , In the display device 41, a new decoration special figure starting memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure starting memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 85b Change.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed in the new decoration special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "80" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be transferred to the in-execution memory display section 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "900" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be shifted to the memory display unit 84 during execution, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. - 特許庁In addition, the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect for the starting memory corresponding to the decoration special figure starting memory display is executed.

Note that the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" or "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support that is smaller than the number of times of support actually provided) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (here, the starting memory generated in FIG. 61 (f)) that is not subject to the pending change effect, and the starting memory that is the target of the pending change effect (Here, the starting memory generated in FIG. 61 (g)) and the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the support number of times to be added to both can be displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is not subject to the pending change production.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" are supported. It was possible to display the number of supports to be added to both the decorative special figure start memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure fluctuation display game where the result is "support hit". , but not limited to. For example, the number of supports to be added may be displayed only on the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "missing".

For example, if it is possible to display the number of supports to be added only in the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the loss variation (special figure variation display game in which the result is "miss"), the display of the number of support Since the presence or absence of a change suggests whether or not it is a losing change, it is possible for the player to know that the game result is a "lose" even before the losing change starts, and the interest of the losing change is increased. It is likely to decline.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" are displayed. By making it possible to display the number of supports to be added to both the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "per support", Whether or not the number of times of support is displayed does not indicate whether or not there is a loss variation, so the interest in the loss variation can be improved.

In FIG. 61, the case of executing the additional effect during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the result is "support hit". It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode entered upon completion of a particular special figure 1 variable display game.
In addition, in FIG. 61, the case where the additional effect is executed during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the additional effect is executed when the result is "support hit It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is A", and the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit B". It is also possible to run inside

In addition, in FIG. 61(b), the first decorative game display section 81 temporarily stops displaying "767", which is the result mode common to each "support winning", and in FIG. 61(c), displays the first decorative game. Although "767", which is a result mode common to each "support win", is stop-displayed on the display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "supporter winning C", "656", which is the result mode of "supporter winning C", is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81, and the first decoration game display unit 81 81 and the second decorative game display portion 82 may stop and display "656", which is the result mode of "support win C".
For example, when "656", which is a result mode unique to "support win C", is temporarily stopped or stopped, the player can grasp the number of times of support actually given before the additional effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a possibility that the interest of the additional performance may decrease. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, by temporarily stopping or stopping the common result mode for each "supporting win", the additional effect is actually given at the stage before execution. Since it is possible to obscure the number of times the support is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the additional production.

[Modified example of support hit judgment]
In the above-described embodiment, the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform small hit determination (small hit lottery) and support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 40, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 29 (a)), and the determination result is If it is a big hit, it acquires the stop design information corresponding to the big hit design random number (see FIG. 29(b)), and if the judgment result is a small hit, it obtains the stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number. (see FIG. 29(c)), and if the determination result is a support win, stop symbol information corresponding to the support win symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 29(d)), and the determination result is neither In this case, the lost stop symbol information is obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the support win may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, when the determination result is a big win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big win symbol random number is acquired, and when the determination result is a small win, it corresponds to the small win symbol random number. If the determination result is a support win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support hit symbol random number is acquired, and if the determination result is neither, the stop symbol information of the misalignment is acquired, and the specified In the game states ST11 to ST13, when the judgment result is a big win, stop pattern information corresponding to the big win pattern random number is acquired, and when the judgment result is a small win, stop pattern information corresponding to the small win pattern random number is acquired. However, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit (including the case where the determination result is a support hit), it is also possible to acquire misplaced stop symbol information. That is, when in the high probability state or in the case of general electricity support, skip the processing related to the support (steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A370 to A372, steps A390 to A392, etc.) You can do it.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modified example 1 of support hit determination]
For example, the support hit determination may be performed depending on whether or not the value of the support hit random number extracted separately from the big hit random number matches the support hit determination value. In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 62 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 62 (a)), and if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, a support hit is determined using a support hit random number. A determination is made (see FIG. 62(d)). Then, when the judgment result is a big hit, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired (see FIG. 62(b)), and when the judgment result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit pattern random number. (See FIG. 62(c)), and if the determination result is a support win (that is, if "support is activated"), the stop symbol information corresponding to the support win symbol random number is acquired. (Refer to FIG. 62(e)), if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. In this special figure start opening switch common processing, after performing the processing of step A144, the support per random number is extracted and prepared (step A150a), and the prepared support per support random number is saved in the RWM per support random number storage area. After performing (step A150b), the process proceeds to step A149a.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 64(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 36(a). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, after performing the process of step A363, the random number per support is loaded from the random number storage area per special support 1 of RWM (for reservation number 1) and prepared (step A373a), After performing a process (step A373b) for clearing the random number storage area per support (for the reserved number 1) to 0, the process proceeds to step A364.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 64(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 36(b). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, after performing the process of step A383, the support per random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepared (step A393a), and the special figure After performing a process (step A393b) of clearing the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 per 2 supports, the process proceeds to step A384.

[Support hit determination process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the support hit determination process shown in FIG. In this support hit determination process, after performing the processing of step A422, it is determined whether the value of the target support hit random number is less than the support hit lower limit determination value (step A423a).

Then, if the value of the target random number per support is less than the lower limit judgment value for support (step A423a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a failure as the determination result (step A428), and perform support hit determination processing. finish. Also, if the value of the target random number per support is not less than the lower limit judgment value for support (step A423a; N), it is determined whether the probability is high (step A424). Then, if it is in a high probability state (step A424; Y), set the upper limit judgment value per support in high probability (step A425), and check whether the value of the random number per support is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support Determine (step A427a). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step A424; N), set the upper limit judgment value per support in low probability (step A426), and determine whether the value of the target random number per support is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (Step A427a).

If the value of the target support hit random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, set a loss as the determination result (step A428), and end the big hit determination process. In addition, if the value of the target support hit random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination End the process.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, the setting 1 is the most likely to win, and the setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is different for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit determination is performed using the support hit random number, and when the determination result is a big hit, the big hit pattern random number is supported. If the judgment result is a small hit, the stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number is acquired, and if the judgment result is a support hit, the stop design information corresponding to the support hit design random number. is acquired, and when the determination result is neither, the stop symbol information of the deviation is acquired, and in the specific game state ST11 to ST13, the support hit determination using the support hit random number is not performed, and the determination result is a big hit. In some cases, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired, and when the judgment result is a small win, the stop pattern information corresponding to the small hit pattern random number is acquired, and when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit. You may make it acquire stop design information of a loss. That is, when it is in a high probability state or when it is in a general electricity support, the processing related to the support hit (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A373a to A373b, steps A370 to A372, Steps A393a-A393b, Steps A390-A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modified example 2 of support hit determination]
Further, for example, without performing the support hit determination, the support hit symbol or the missing symbol may be acquired using the support hit symbol random number. That is, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning symbol random number may include not only the stopping symbol information of winning the support but also the stopping symbol information of winning. In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 66 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 66(a)). (See FIG. 66(b)), and if the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 66(c)). Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the random number of the support winning pattern, the stop pattern information of the support hit or the stop pattern information of the loss is obtained (see FIG. 66(d)). .

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support), if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support winning symbol random number is the support winning stop symbol information or In addition to acquiring lost stop symbol information, in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, the lost stop symbol information may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Other modification 1]
The small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning) and the support winning pattern (result mode of the supporting win) may be used together. Specifically, for example, when a dual-purpose symbol serving as both a small winning symbol and a support winning symbol is provided, and the dual-purpose symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device 41 (and the collective display device 50), the small winning game state is established. You may enter into chance mode (2nd specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13) after completion.

[Other modification 2]
The normal variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed players can win (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, in the case of frequently stopping support winning symbols (support winning A symbols, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support, the start and end of the chance mode occur frequently. By arranging the normal variable winning device 37 at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, it is not necessary to separate the game balls into the left game area and the right game area according to the start and end of the chance mode. Gone. Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both the right-handed and left-handed players can win, the large winning opening and the normal winning opening are positioned upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. A variable winning device 37 may be provided with a function (such as a nail or a channel) for distributing game balls. Note that the support win symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol that corresponds to the support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the support count is less than 5 times. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 3]
The result mode of the normal figure fluctuation display game may be provided with the support winning pattern (result mode of supporting support) without providing the support winning pattern (result mode of supporting hit) in the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure variation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure variation display game.

[Other modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game is shifted to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, irrespective of the stopping support winning symbol (the number of times of support provided), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the game shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the support hit pattern (support hit A pattern, etc.) with a relatively small number of corresponding support stops, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed to prompt the user to accumulate the second start memory. can be Note that the support win symbol corresponding to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol corresponding to the support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the corresponding support count is 1 time. It may be a support winning pattern.
Also, only when the first special figure fluctuation display game after shifting to the chance mode is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed and the second start memory is stored. You can encourage me.
Further, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the shift is made to the chance mode, a right-handed instruction effect may be executed to prompt the player to store the second start memory.

[Other modification 5]
In this embodiment, when it is not in the general electric support, it is a state where there is no time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal diagram fluctuation display game, and when it is in the general electric support, it is a time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the general diagram fluctuation display game is shortened. Since it is in a certain state, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is in the general electric support, but this is not limited to For example, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to accumulate the second starting memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it shifts to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second start memory before the game, it becomes possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, which is advantageous for the player. You can proceed with the game.
In addition, if the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the general electric power support is in progress, the general electric support It is preferable to set the normal pattern per probability to 0 when it is not inside.

[Other modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the number of times of support given this time is always notified when the chance mode is entered. That is, regardless of the stopped support per pattern (number of support given), when the stop display time starts, the number of support given this time is notified, but it is not limited to this. Whether or not to report the number of times of support may be determined according to the number of times of support. Specifically, for example, when a support win symbol (support win A symbol, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of support times stops, the number of support times given this time is not notified even if the stop display time starts. In addition, when other support winning symbols are stopped, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support given this time may be notified. Note that the support win symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol that corresponds to a support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the corresponding support count is less than 10 times. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 7]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the right-handed instruction effect (instruction of the shooting direction) is displayed as a variable display of the game to be executed next to the game in which the result is the specified result (support winning game). Made it start on start. That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game in which the result is the specific result (supporting game). did. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game that is executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game). Also, the chance mode notification effect and the right-hand hitting instruction effect may be started at the same timing, or may be started at different timings.

[Other modification 9]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 58, the support number informing effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the support win game (t66, t76), but it is not limited to this. For example, the support number notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or may be executed first after shifting to the chance mode. It may be started at the start of the variable display of the special figure variable display game (t68, t78). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 10]
Also, in the present embodiment, the big-hit pattern, the small-hit pattern, and the support-hit pattern are obtained using different random numbers, but the same random number is used to obtain the big-hit design, the small-hit design, and the support-hit design. You can make it work. In other words, one random number may be shared for the big win pattern random number, the small win pattern random number, and the supporter win pattern random number, and the big win pattern, the small win pattern, and the supporter win pattern may be distributed.

[Other modification 11]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game over the other, or the special figure 1 variation display game And it may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game in order of winning.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be awarded, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11) are specified. a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and a special game state; is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) of the special results, a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is a special result When a different specific result (support hit) is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the player's usage amount and suppress the reduction speed of the ball. is possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the wave of paid out balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST13). When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset, and the period corresponding to the specific result can be set again (see FIG. 31).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it is possible to extend the time, the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (sapo win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating ST13). In the case of a result, it is possible to configure so that the period obtained by adding the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period can be reset as the specific game period (Fig. 32(a)) reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) and specific game state that occurred without the occurrence of a special game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) And, it can be configured to be able to execute the production.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13).
In addition, the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and the specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), different modes of effects may be executed. Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same mode of effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (the number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. The effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of the present embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 53 and 58).
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the third embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the second embodiment in that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board presentation device 44 having a movable member and a light-emitting member, and performing game presentation by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light-emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is a first start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 68). In the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for recovering game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.

A general prize winning port 35 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the left of the first start prize winning port 36 . Winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 68). In addition, in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the right of the first start winning opening 36, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is also detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 68).

As shown in FIG. 67 , a normal symbol start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the upper portion of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 68) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. Below the normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this general winning hole 35 .

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted between a state where game balls are not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. ) 38 are provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by tilting the opening/closing member 38c to the right around the lower end. The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 68).

Inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which game balls can flow is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 68) is provided to change the probability of game balls flowing into the specific area ) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 68) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 68) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of playing balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), and the number detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed is designed not to open a new upper grand prize opening.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (first start winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) is provided. ing. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 68). The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a plate-like movable member 37b that can slide back and forth. unfavorable condition). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retreated backward by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 68) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is played. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which balls can easily flow in.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c. The movable member of the device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape by opening. Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this normal variable winning device 37 . The flow path on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30a for recovering game balls that do not win, such as a winning port. Also, the left channel of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates with the lower part of the game area 32 .
In the right part of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97 that gives the starting condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) (Second startup winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 68).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36 and to the left of the second starting winning opening 97, there is a state where game balls are not accepted due to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A second special variable prize winning device (lower grand prize winning opening) 39 is provided which can be converted to a state of easy acceptance. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (sliding) of the opening/closing member 39c. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 68). The game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate that allows the game area 32 to be seen through.
In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower left part of the game board main body 80, a package for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a normal figure fluctuation display game A display device 50 is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37 is not the second start winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game), but the special figure 1 variation The point that it is the first start winning area that gives the start condition of the display game (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) below the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 3) in that a second start winning port 97 (second start winning area) is provided to give the start condition of .

FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 68, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment has an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 connected to the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97. It differs from the game control device 100 (see FIG. 5) of the second embodiment.

FIG. 69 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the same random numbers as those used in the big-hit determination (big-hit lottery) are used to perform small-hit determination (small-hit lottery) and supporter-hit determination (supporter-hit lottery). That is, in this embodiment, the big hit determination, the small hit determination, and the support hit determination are performed using the big hit random number (see FIG. 69(a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the big hit pattern random number Acquire the corresponding stop design information (see FIG. 69(b)), and if the judgment result is a small hit, acquire the stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number (see FIG. 69(c)), If the determination result is a support hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 69 (d)), and if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired. do. In addition, the support hit may be derived only when the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), or the state without general electric support (normal game state ST24, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST21), or may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST24 (low probability no support).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST24, a first specific game state ST21, a second specific game state ST22, and a third specific game state ST23. In addition, as the game state, there is a first special game state (big win game state) based on the first special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) based on the second special result (small win). is omitted here.

In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result (jackpot) to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the game In the state, the main starting area which is the starting area to be mainly aimed at, the main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 or the second starting prize-winning port 97 by hitting to the right. It is possible. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is higher than the special figure 1 in the small hit probability, which is the probability of becoming a small hit (second special result).

The normal game state ST24 is a state where the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST24, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST24. .

The first specific game state ST21 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but special figure variable display. There is a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game and the normal figure fluctuation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second start winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST24, and the player hits to the right and aims at the second start winning opening 97, thereby achieving a special figure. Playing the two-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. Since the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small win than the special figure 1 variation display game, and the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of a big win, the small win is high in the first specific game state ST21. It occurs with frequency and the number of balls held by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this second specific game state ST22, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game becomes shorter than in the case of the normal game state ST24. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST24 because there is a general power support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST24 and the third game state ST23 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a high probability state, and furthermore, it is a state in which the player's ball possession increases due to frequent occurrence of small hits, so the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game This state is more advantageous for the player than the state ST23.
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), there are two types of jackpots in the special figure 1 variation display game, the probability variable A jackpot and the normal jackpot. There are three types of jackpots: probability variable A jackpot, probability variable B jackpot, and normal jackpot.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot), derivation of the support hit, and completion of the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to a third specific game state ST23, and the special game state. Of the variable probability big hits to be in a high probability state after the end of the game state, if it is a variable probability A big hit, it shifts to a second specific game state ST22, and if it is a probability variable B big hit, it shifts to a first specific game state ST21. .

Specifically, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation A jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and when there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (probability variation operation area ) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, it shifts to the second specific game state ST22. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, the probability variation B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state When the ball flows in and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the game moves to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST23. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 are set to the same chance mode as the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of times of ST (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST21. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, the normal game state ST24 may be entered.
In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 2000 times), which is the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the high probability state, is set, and the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST22. When the number of times reaches the ST number of times, it may be shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game state ST23).
Also, in FIG. 70, the transition of the game state when a big hit is derived as a result of irregular fluctuation is omitted. Specifically, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 70, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) A variable probability B big hit is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state (a game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch 38d If it is detected), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the first specific game state ST21.

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST23, the game shifts to a normal game state ST24. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the normal jackpot support count is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST22, it is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times, When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the second specific game state ST22, the game moves to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the probability variable A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of support times of the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state after the end of the special figure variation display game Move to ST23. In addition, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special figure variation display game. to That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived is the special It does not go through the game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (no support with a high probability), if the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, the special game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the second specific game state ST22 (with high probability support) without going through.

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the third specific game is performed until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) 50 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed, the game moves to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "50 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "50 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), 100 without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and 1000 without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22). When the special figure variation display game is executed once, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electricity support), that is, the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23. If so, the number of times of support is reset, and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is set again (see FIG. 31). Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the presentation mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support times. It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count (Fig. 32 (a) )reference). In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is You may make it change to the said upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be employed (FIG. 32(b)). In this case, the presentation mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Also, only the rank-up of the production mode may be permitted, and the switching of the production mode such as the rank-down may not be performed. Furthermore, when the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is not adopted, the support win symbol may be displayed on the display device 41 as the game result, or the losing symbol may be displayed instead of the support win symbol as the game result. It may be displayed on the display device 41 .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39, or flow into out port 30a and play area 32 discharged from When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the player wins. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 68).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34 by firing a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), and the normal figure start gate 34 General winning prize port 35, normal variable winning device 37, second start winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39, second special variable winning device 39 Players can aim to win a prize through the general prize winning opening 35 arranged on the left side.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this general-purpose starting winning prize is displayed on the general-purpose holding indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display unit provided in the collective display device 50, predetermined multiple lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time is determined in advance. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order shown, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the normal figure display unit of the collective display device 50 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is displayed variably for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured to display.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is hit, the normal pattern display unit of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the lighting pattern as a special result mode, operates the general electric solenoid 37c, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is controlled to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the result on the general pattern display section of the collective display device 50 .

In addition, the winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, the winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning balls to the second starting winning opening 97 are respectively provided inside the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2. It is detected by switch 37a and start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is stored in a predetermined upper limit number ( For example, 4) is stored to the limit, and the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the second start prize opening 97 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) memorize to
Based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting winning port 97, a big hit random number value, a big winning pattern random number value and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively, and extracted. The generated random value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first start memory and the second start memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the first memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 At the same time, it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs a special figure 1 variable display game with a special figure 1 display device (first variation display device) of the collective display device 50 based on the first start memory, and a collective display device based on the second start memory. A special figure 2 variation display game is performed with 50 special figure 2 indicators (second variation display devices). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 (first start winning region) or normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning region) It constitutes first execution control means for controlling the execution of the first variable display game (first special figure variable display game). In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) a second execution control means for controlling the execution of

In the special figure 1 indicator and the special figure 2 indicator of the collective display device 50, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device becomes a special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result and the big hit. Then, it becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator or the special figure 2 indicator becomes a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. It becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small win state). That is, the special figure 1 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 constitutes a first variable display means. In addition, the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 second variation display means form.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the case of the normal game state which is a low probability state, the variation time is the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be awarded, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST24, first specific game state ST21) are specified. a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and a special game state; is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or a probability variable A jackpot) of the special results, a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is a special result When a different specific result (support hit) is obtained, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state (see FIG. 70).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the player's usage amount and suppress the reduction speed of the ball. is possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the wave of paid out balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST23). When a result is obtained, the specific game period being set can be reset, and the period corresponding to the specific result can be set again (see FIG. 31).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (support number) Since it is possible to extend the time, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (support win), the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) is provided with a setting means (game control device 100) for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of support times) for generating ST23). In the case of a result, it is possible to configure so that the period obtained by adding the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period can be reset as the specific game period (Fig. 32(a)) reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) and specific game state that occurred without the occurrence of a special game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) And, it can be configured to be able to execute the production.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23).
In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), different forms of effects may be executed. Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state In ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same mode of effect may be executed.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. The effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (in the case of the present embodiment, the support hit B) may be the same.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 53 and 58).
By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest of the game.
Of course, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment also has the effects illustrated in the second embodiment. It is possible to execute an additional effect, etc., which is performed after the display game ends. Further, in the present embodiment, the modifications of the second embodiment ([Modified example 1 of support hit determination] to [Modified example 2 of support hit determination], [Other modified example 1] to [Other modified example 11 ] etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Also, the configurations of the modifications and the embodiments described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game, and the gaming machine 10 may be a special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with priority over the 2 fluctuation display game, or a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in order of winning, or the special figure 1 It may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a game machine that does not simultaneously display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41. . That is, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be displayed on the display device 41 at the same time.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine having a specific area (variable probability operating area). That is, based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the specific area switch 38d has detected the game ball), instead of generating a high probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a probability variable big hit. Based on this fact, a high probability state may be generated.

10 game machine 37 normal variable winning device 100 game control device (game state control means, setting means)
300 production control device (production control means, instruction means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition, and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. in
A normal variable winning device in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball;
a control means capable of generating a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning in the normal variable winning device is easier than in the normal game state, and the special game state;
The control means is
when the result of the variable display game is the special result, the specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated;
When the result of the variable display game is a specific result different from the special result and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game corresponding to the specific result without generating the special game state. state can be generated anew, and
Even if the result of the variable display game is the specific result, if the predetermined condition is not established, the special game state and the specific game state are not newly generated,
irrespective of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, if the result of the variable display game is the specified result, stop displaying the identification information corresponding to the specified result ;
There are a plurality of types of the identification result,
A gaming machine , wherein the identification information to be stop-displayed when the result of the variable display game is the specified result differs according to the type of the specified result .

Images